Samsung | MX-HS7000 | دليل المستخدم | Samsung MX-HS7000 User manual

Samsung MX-HS7000 User manual
‫‪MX-HS6000‬‬
‫‪MX-HS7000‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪PREMIUM Hi-Fi Component‬‬
‫)‪ CD/USB‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ MP3/WMA/CD-DA‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺋﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺸﻜﺮﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ‪.Samsung‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫‪www.samsung.com/register‬‬
‫‪2014-3-12 11:51:36‬‬
‫‪02680K-MX-HS6000_HS7000-ZN-ARA-0220.indd 1‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻟﻤﻮﻇﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻫﻠﻴﻦ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺟﻬﺪ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺧﻄﻴﺮ" ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻳﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪1‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺧﻄﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻇﻔﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻫﻠﻴﻦ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪LASER PRODUCT‬‬
‫‪LASER PRODUKT‬‬
‫‪LASER LAITE‬‬
‫‪LASER APPARAT‬‬
‫‪LÁSER CLASE 1‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺼﻨﻒ ﻛﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ .1‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺨﺎﺫ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻟﻺﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ 21CFR 1040.10‬ﺇﻻ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،50‬ﺑﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪ 24‬ﻳﻮﻧﻴﻮ ‪.2007‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻳﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ‪ .‬ﻓﺘﺠﻨﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺸﻌﺎﻉ‪(FDA 21 CFR) .‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻳﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺌﺔ ‪ 3B‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ‪ .‬ﻓﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺸﻌﺎﻉ‪(1-IEC 60825) .‬‬
‫‪CLASS 1‬‬
‫‪KLASSE 1‬‬
‫‪LUOKAN 1‬‬
‫‪KLASS 1‬‬
‫‪PRODUCTO‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺣﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻠﺒﻚ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ً‬
‫)ﺃﻱ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻠﺘﺰﻡ ﺑﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻴﺐ ﺑﻪ‬
‫)ﺃﻱ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻠﺘﺰﻡ ﺑﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪2014-3-12 11:52:54‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪02680K-MX-HS6000_HS7000-ZN-ARA-0220.indd 2‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪2014-3-12 11:52:55‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻚ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻇﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫)ﺃﺛﺎﺙ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻟﻪ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ‪ 3‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 7.5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 10‬ﺳﻢ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺒﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻋﺪﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺗﻌﻄﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻮﻳﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻸﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺘﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻛﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻀﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻟﻘﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 6‬ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺧﻠﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫)‪ 15‬ﺳﻨﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮًﺍ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻘﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﺮﺫﺍﺫ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺁﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻮﺍﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺁﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻫﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻈﻞ ﺟﺎﻫﺰًﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻘﺒﺴﺎ ﻣﺆﺭﺿﻴﻦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﺴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ ﻓﺎﻟﺘﺄﺭﻳﺾ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬‫ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ‬
‫‪ I‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻭﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ‬‫ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ‬‫ﻗﺎﺫﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻔﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻒ ﺧﻔﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻣﺴﺤﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻛﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺗﺮﻛﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﺊ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﻣﺲ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﺧﺮﺝ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺎ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺩﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪02680K-MX-HS6000_HS7000-ZN-ARA-0220.indd 3‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ‪) DRM‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ( ﺍﻵﻣﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫‪ 80‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪ 16‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ~‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ~ ‪320‬‬
‫‪MPEG 1 Layer3‬‬
‫‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪CD-R‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ CD-R‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ )ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ( ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ CD-R‬ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ 650‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ 74/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ CD-R‬ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ 700‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪80/‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ‪) CD-RW‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ( ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ CD-R‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ "ﺗﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ" ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪*.mp3‬‬
‫‪ 80‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪ 16‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ~‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ~ ‪320‬‬
‫‪MPEG 2 Layer3‬‬
‫‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪ 80‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪ 16‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ~‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ~ ‪320‬‬
‫‪MPEG 2.5 Layer3‬‬
‫‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪*.wma‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪MP3-CD‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ CD-R‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪MP3‬‬
‫ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ISO 9660‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Joliet‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ )‪.(+ = / .‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺿﻐﻂ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 128‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺏ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻔﺮﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫)‪) ،(VBR‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻔﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻣﻦ ‪ 32‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 320‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ً 999‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪2014-3-12 11:52:56‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‬
‫‪ 56‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻓﻲ‬
‫_‪ 16 Wave_Format‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ~‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ~ ‪128‬‬
‫‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪MSAudio1‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪ 56‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻓﻲ‬
‫_‪ 16 Wave_Format‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ~‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ~ ‪128‬‬
‫‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪MSAudio2‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻓﻲ‬
‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
‫✎ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻲ ‪.WMA‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪02680K-MX-HS6000_HS7000-ZN-ARA-0220.indd 4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪CD/MP3/CD-R‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ؟‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Hi-Fi-Component‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪Hi-Fi-Component‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪2014-3-12 11:52:58‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) My Karaoke‬ﻛﺎﺭﻳﻮﻛﻲ(‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) EQ‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪FOOTBALL MODE‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪GOAL‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪GIGA SOUND‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪BEAT WAVING‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪DJ BEAT‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪PANNING‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪NON-STOP MUSIC RELAY‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪DANCE TIME‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪TEMPO‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Hi-Fi Component‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪SoundConnect‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪Hi-Fi Component‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Hi-Fi Component‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Hi-Fi-Component‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪02680K-MX-HS6000_HS7000-ZN-ARA-0220.indd 5‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫‪1 2 3456789 0‬‬
‫‪j k lm n‬‬
‫‪i‬‬
‫!‬
‫‪h‬‬
‫@‬
‫‪#‬‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫‪^%$‬‬
‫&‬
‫) ( ‪e dcb a‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ‬
‫*‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪BEAT WAVING‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫)‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪) MIC‬ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ(‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪TUNER / AUX‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪DISPLAY / DEMO‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪TV SOUND CONNECT‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪EQ‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪) AUX IN 1‬ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ‪(1‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪.MP3‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪) AUX IN 1‬ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ‪(1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪/‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪.MP3‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) TUNER/AUX‬ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻒ‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪.AUX1‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪USB REC‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ USB 2‬ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ USB 1‬ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪FOOTBALL MODE‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪GIGA SOUND BEAT‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﺴﻨﻰ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫!‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪REPEAT‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫@‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪SEARCH‬‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫‪#‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪NON-STOP MUSIC RELAY‬‬
‫‪$‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪OPEN / CLOSE‬‬
‫‪h‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪DANCE TIME‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪i‬‬
‫‪DJ JOG‬‬
‫^‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪PROGRAM‬‬
‫‪j‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪+PANNING‬‬
‫&‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪DJ BEAT‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪CD/ Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪/‬ﺗﺨﻄﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪2014-3-12 11:52:59‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪TEMPO‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪02680K-MX-HS6000_HS7000-ZN-ARA-0220.indd 6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫‪MX-HS6000‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪MX-HS7000‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺮﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ‪ 10‬ﺳﻢ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺘﺎﻥ ‪AUX IN 2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ( ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ‪ AUX IN 2‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ‪Audio Out‬‬
‫)ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺇﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ TUNER/AUX‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪.AUX 2‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 8‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪AUX‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪2014-3-12 11:53:02‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺮﺟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ُ .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫• ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪(MX-HS6000) 2.1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪(MX-HS7000) 2.2‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ )ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ (‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ )ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪) SUBWOOFER‬ﻣﻀﺨﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪)FM‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪) FM‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ( ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪.FM‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺒﻂﺀ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻌﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺟﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺣﻜﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺴﻄﺢ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻠﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪ FM‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ‪ FM‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺤﻤﻞ ‪ 75‬ﺃﻭﻡ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺒﺔ ‪Speaker Beat Waving‬‬
‫)ﺗﻘﻠﺐ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪02680K-MX-HS6000_HS7000-ZN-ARA-0220.indd 7‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫‪) MUTE‬ﻟﻘﻄﻊ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﺆﻗﺘًﺎ‪ .‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻹﻋﺎدة‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت‪(.‬‬
‫اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪BEAT WAVING‬‬
‫‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪CD‬‬
‫‪TV SoundConnect‬‬
‫‪USB REC‬‬
‫‪REC SPEED‬‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫‪TUNING MODE‬‬
‫‪TUNER/AUX‬‬
‫‪MO/ST‬‬
‫‪+PANNING‬‬
‫‪DJ BEAT‬‬
‫‪NON-STOP MUSIC RELAY‬‬
‫‪EFFECT LEVEL‬‬
‫‪TEMPO‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬إﻳﻘﺎف ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫إﻳﻘﺎف‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ‬
‫‪REPEAT‬‬
‫‪GIGA SOUND BEAT‬‬
‫‪GOAL‬‬
‫‪FOOTBALL‬‬
‫‪EQ‬‬
‫‪DANCE TIME‬‬
‫رﻓﻊ‪/‬ﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫‪.,, TUNING/ALBUM‬‬
‫‪PROGRAM‬‬
‫‪DELETE‬‬
‫‪) SLEEP‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ وﻗﺖ اﻟﺴﻜﻮن ﻹﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪(.‬‬
‫‪TIMER SET‬‬
‫‪TIMER ON/OFF‬‬
‫‪AUTO CHANGE‬‬
‫‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫‪MY KARAOKE‬‬
‫رﻓﻊ‪/‬ﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت اﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻮن‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪2014/3/28 10:06:20‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت ﻓﻲ وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻮاﻓﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻊ اﻷﺷﻜﺎل اﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة داﺧﻞ ﺣﺠﻴﺮة اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (+) :‬ﻣﻊ )‪ (+‬و)–( ﻣﻊ )–(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت ﺑﺈﻟﻘﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻨﺎر‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮض اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت ﻟﺪواﺋﺮ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮة أو اﻟﻔﻚ أو‬
‫اﻟﺤﺮارة اﻟﺰاﺋﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎك ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪوث اﻧﻔﺠﺎر ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﺳﺘﺒﺪال‬
‫اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﺑﻨﻮع ﺑﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ‪ .‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪل اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ إﻻ‬
‫ﺑﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﻨﻮع أو ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮع ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻞ إﻟﻰ ‪ 23‬ﻗﺪ ًﻣﺎ )‪ 7‬أﻣﺘﺎر( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪02680K-MX-HS6000_HS7000-ZN-ARA-0315.indd 8‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﻁ ﺃﺭﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫)‪(8ea‬‬
‫ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪FM/AM‬‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫| ﻫﺎﻡ |‬
‫✎ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫✎ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺮﺩ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺛﻘﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(MX-HS7000‬‬
‫✎ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻀﺨﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻭﺗﺮﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪5‬‬
‫ﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ‪) .‬ﻟﻠﻄﺮﺍﺯ ‪ MX-HS7000‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫)‪(MX-HS6000‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺭﺟﻞ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺭﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻧﺰﻻﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﻁ ﺃﺭﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪2014-3-12 11:53:13‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪02680K-MX-HS6000_HS7000-ZN-ARA-0220.indd 9‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ LED/‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫✎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ "‪ "DEMO‬ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ DISPLAY/DEMO‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫• ‪) DEMO function‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪DIMMER‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Dimmer‬ﻭﺧﻔﺾ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪LED OFF‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻓﺾ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪Clock ON‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪Display/LED ON‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻤﺒﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﺤﻮﻻً‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪ ،OPEN/CLOSE‬ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ 3‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) Pause‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) Stop‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪DEMO Music‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ DISPLAY/DEMO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ DISPLAY‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 5‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪) LED Off DIMMER‬ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ( ‪] --:--‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ[ ‪) LED On‬ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ( ‪DEMO‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Demo Music‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ DISPLAY/DEMO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ DISPLAY‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 5‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﻨﺪﺋ ٍﺬ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ TUNER/AUX‬ﺃﻭ ‪ CD/Bluetooth‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ 25‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) Stop‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪CD/MP3/CD-R‬‬
‫| ﻫﺎﻡ |‬
‫✎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻭ‪ CD-R‬ﻭ‪.CD-RW‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ ،MP3/WMA‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻳﺤﻤﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪) .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪(.‬‬
‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
‫✎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﻻ‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪) POWER‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ() (‪ ,‬ﻭ‪) VOL‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‪ ,‬ﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪2014-3-12 11:53:23‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﻤﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ )@‪ ،* ،$ ،‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪02680K-MX-HS6000_HS7000-ZN-ARA-0220.indd 10‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫>ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ<‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ VOL+‬ﺃﻭ ‪ VOL-‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ‪ 31‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫)‪ VOLUME MIN، VOLUME01~ VOLUME 29‬ﻭ‬
‫‪.(VOLUME MAX‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪ .5‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ ‪ 3‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪ ,‬ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ ‪ 3‬ﺛﻮﺍ ٍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ‪ VOLUME‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 3‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻻﺣﻖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫✎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﺗﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ”‪) “NO DISC‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‬
‫✎ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ MP3/CD-R‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫✎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ‪.........................‬‬
‫✎ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ً‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺷﻴ ًﺌﺎ ﺛﻘﻴﻼً ﻓﻮﻗﻪ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺷﻜﻠﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻛﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﻠﺐ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺧﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.REPEAT‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪MP3 : OFF TRACK DIR ALL RANDOM‬‬
‫‪CD : OFF TRACK ALL RANDOM‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪2014-3-12 11:53:24‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫‪02680K-MX-HS6000_HS7000-ZN-ARA-0220.indd 11‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪ REPEAT‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪."OFF‬‬
‫• ‪ : OFF‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : TRACK‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
‫✎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : DIR‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : ALL‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : RANDOM‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻔﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ USB‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ )‪ (HDD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.MP3/WMA‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.REPEAT‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪OFF TRACK DIR ALL RANDOM‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪ REPEAT‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪."OFF‬‬
‫• ‪ : OFF‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : TRACK‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫• ‪ : DIR‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : ALL‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
‫• ‪ : RANDOM‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫✎ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪USB‬‬
‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫✎ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺬﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﺬﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫| ﻫﺎﻡ |‬
‫✎ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪2014-3-12 11:53:26‬‬
‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪02680K-MX-HS6000_HS7000-ZN-ARA-0220.indd 12‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫| ﻫﺎﻡ |‬
‫✎ ﻻ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ DELETE‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪."DEL N‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ DELETE‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪."DEL Y‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ¬‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "DELETE END‬ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ . / , TUNING/ALBUM‬ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
‫•‬
‫✎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺟﺬﺭﻱ ﺑﺪﻻً ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪. / , TUNING/ALBUM‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫•‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ REMOVE‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.USB‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪2014-3-12 11:53:27‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪/‬ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻻ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ‬
‫)‪ (HDD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪FAT‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪USB 2.0‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪ USB 2.0‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪ USB‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺑﺒﻌﻀﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ ‪) DRM‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ( ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )‪ (DRM‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ DRM‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛَﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺻﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ ،mp3.‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪ MPEG 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪.2‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ ‪ USB‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻻ ‪ 15‬ﺣﺮ ًﻓﺎ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ 160‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺩﻋﻢ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ‪160‬‬
‫ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪) USB‬ﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺹ( ﺗﺄﺧﺮًﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪ USB‬ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪USBVER1.1‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺒﻂﺀ ﻭﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﻋﻤﻪ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬
‫)ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻓﻮﻟﺘﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ STOP‬ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ 25‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ USB‬ﻭ‪ ،iPods‬ﻭ‪iPhones‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫‪02680K-MX-HS6000_HS7000-ZN-ARA-0220.indd 13‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪ /‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻭ ‪.‬‬
‫‪CDDA/MP3-CD/USB‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺔ ‪ CD‬ﻭ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.SEARCH‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،SEARCH‬ﺃ ِﺩﺭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻴﻨﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭًﺍ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) CD Program‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ(‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪) USB REC‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ (USB‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ DELETE‬ﺃﻭ ‪ . TUNING/ALBUM‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ، ,‬ﻓﻠﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ "‪."PROG‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ً‬
‫>ثحبلا ةشاش<‬
‫راسملا رشؤم‬
‫يلكلا‬
‫‪0 12 0 25‬‬
‫راسملا رشؤم‬
‫ددحملا‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ PROGRAM‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪:‬‬
‫‪C0 1 02‬‬
‫‪0 1 002‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪MP3/CD-R/‬‬
‫‪. USB‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 99‬ﻣﺴﺎﺭًﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ CD/USB‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،CD/USB‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.CD/USB‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ¬ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ¬ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .6‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ PROGRAM‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪:‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫‪PP0 1 -‬‬‫‪0 1 ---‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.REPEAT‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫)‪ =01‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ -- ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪ =---‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ(‬
‫‪OFF TRACK ALL‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﻣﻘﺒﺾ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫)‪ =01‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪002 ،‬ﺃﻭ‪ =0022‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ(‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ¬ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪0 2 ---‬‬
‫‪PP0 2 --‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ 3‬ﻭ‪ 4‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .6‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ .7‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪2014-3-12 11:53:28‬‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫‪02680K-MX-HS6000_HS7000-ZN-ARA-0220.indd 14‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻫﻮ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻄﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺴﺪﻙ ﻣﻼﻣﺲ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪.Hi-Fi Component‬‬
‫ ﻳﺨﻀﻊ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻟﻠﺘﻘﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ‬‫ﻋﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ‬‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻓﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Hi-Fi Component‬ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻧﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Hi-Fi Component‬ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺨﻔﻀﺖ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻨﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ Hi-Fi Component‬ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺋﻂ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻮﺍﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ CD/Bluetooth‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪Hi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ Component‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪.BT‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ WAIT‬ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ BT READY‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫‪.Hi-Fi Component‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ؟‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ!‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Hi-Fi-Component‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫• ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻚ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻓﺤﺼﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺣﺪﺩ "‪ "[Samsung] HI-FI XXXXXX‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻚ‬
‫‪Device name BLUETOOTH‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ ،Component‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ "‪Samsung] HI-FI‬‬
‫‪ "[XXXXXX‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Component‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪Hi-Fi‬‬
‫‪.Component‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،Bluetooth‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪/‬ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺯ‪.‬‬
‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Hi-Fi Component‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ SBC‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 237‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪48‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ SBC‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ )‪ 328‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ‬
‫ﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ 44.1‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‪.‬‬
‫✎ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ AVRCP‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫✎ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪A2DP‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫✎ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫‪) HF‬ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪2014-3-12 11:53:29‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪02680K-MX-HS6000_HS7000-ZN-ARA-0220.indd 15‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫✎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫✎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Hi-Fi Component‬ﻭﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ .‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫✎ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Hi-Fi Component‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻗﻮﻱ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪Hi-Fi‬‬‫‪. Component‬‬
‫ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪Hi-Fi‬‬‫‪ Component‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ‬‫ﻭﺻﻼﺕ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻳﺴﻨﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﻓﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪Hi-Fi-‬‬
‫‪Component‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪.Hi-Fi Component‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ ‪.Hi-Fi Component‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ‪ Hi-Fi Component‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Hi-Fi Component‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪BT‬‬
‫‪ DISCONNECTED BT READY‬ﻣﻔﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Hi-Fi-Component‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫✎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻨﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﺨﻄﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪Hi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ Component‬ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ )‪ 5‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫✎ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‬
‫✎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪Hi-Fi Component‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 25‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺎﻫﺰ‪.‬‬
‫✎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪،Hi-Fi Component‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Component‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ )ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‬
‫"‪) "REQUEST‬ﺑﺤﺚ( ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪TV SoundConnect‬‬
‫)ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪) Bluetooth‬ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪Bluetooth Power On‬‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ)‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ "‪Bluetooth Power‬‬
‫‪) On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ(" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪) .‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺑﻤﻨﺘﺠﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪Hi-Fi Component BLUETOOTH POWER‬‬
‫‪ ON BLUETOOTH POWER OFF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ CD/Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Hi-Fi Component‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪Hi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .Component‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
‫✎ ﺳﻴﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Hi-Fi Component‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪) .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪2014-3-12 11:53:32‬‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫‪02680K-MX-HS6000_HS7000-ZN-ARA-0220.indd 16‬‬
‫✎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Hi-Fi Component‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪.TV SoundConnect‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫‪ SoundConnect‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SoundShare‬ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪.Samsung‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ TV SoundConnect‬ﺑﻤﻜﻮﻥ ‪Hi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪.TV SOUNDCONNECT‬‬
‫‪WAIT SEARCH REQUEST‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪Hi-Fi Component‬‬
‫ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬
‫‪SoundConnect‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪Hi-Fi Component‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ SoundConnect‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Hi-Fi Component‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫✎ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪TV Sound‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ 5‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪،‬‬
‫‪ ،Connect‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪.Hi-Fi Component‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Hi-Fi Component‬ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Hi-Fi Component‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪TV‬‬
‫‪ DISCONNECTED REQUEST‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Hi-Fi Component‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪Add New Device‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ On‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪TV‬‬
‫‪ SoundConnect‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪) .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Hi-Fi Component‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪TV‬‬
‫‪ SoundConnect‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪Hi-‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .Fi Component‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪Hi-Fi Component‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻼً ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ‪[TV] Name‬‬
‫‪ CONNECTED TV‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫✎ ﻭﺳﻴﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Hi-Fi Component‬ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺒﻌﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪) .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪Hi-Fi‬‬
‫‪.Component‬‬
‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
‫✎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،TV SoundConnect‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫✎ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ SoundConnect‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﺬ ‪ .2012‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ SoundShare‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪.SoundConnect‬‬
‫)ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫✎ ﻗﺪ ﻳُﻔﻘﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Hi-Fi Component‬ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪6.5‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺪﺍﻡ )‪ 2‬ﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫✎ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‬
‫✎ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Hi-Fi Component‬ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 25‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫✎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،Hi-Fi Component‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ .TV SoundConnect‬ﻭﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺻﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Hi-Fi Component‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺨﺮﺝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪ TV SoundConnect‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪2014-3-12 11:53:33‬‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫‪02680K-MX-HS6000_HS7000-ZN-ARA-0220.indd 17‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) My Karaoke‬ﻛﺎﺭﻳﻮﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) My Karaoke‬ﻛﺎﺭﻳﻮﻛﻲ( ﻟﻠﻐﻨﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻔﺮﺩﻙ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻭ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ‪) MIC‬ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ( ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪MIC‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ( ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ 6.3‬ﻣﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻚ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ‪-‬ﻣﻮﺻﻞ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ( ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﻢ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ‪MIC‬‬‫)ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )ﺫﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ‬
‫‬‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ( ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ + ,-MIC VOL‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) MY KARAOKE‬ﻛﺎﺭﻳﻮﻛﻲ( ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻜﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ON OFF‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺳﻤﻌﺖ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ )ﺃﻧﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﻮﺍﺀ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﻳﻮﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ‪) AUX‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ( ﻭ‬
‫‪) TUNER‬ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻒ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫‪) GIGA SOUND‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺟﻴﺠﺎ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺟﻴﺠﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪GIGA SOUND‬‬
‫‪.BEAT‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ My Karaoke‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.GIGA SOUND DEAT‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪My Karaoke‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺗُﻔﻘﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ My Karaoke‬ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪.Hi-Fi Component‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ My Karaoke‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫‪ ،Bluetooth‬ﻭ‪ ،TV SoundConnect‬ﻭ‪ ،FM‬ﻭ‪.AUX‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪2014-3-12 11:53:34‬‬
‫‪AUTO CHANGE OFF AUTO CHANGE ALL‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ‪.CD/USB‬‬
‫ ‪AUTO CHANGE OFF AUTO CHANGE ALL‬‬
‫‪AUTO CHANGE PROGRAM‬‬
‫ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ AUTO CHANGE‬ﻫﻮ "‪،"ALL‬‬‫ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪DISC USB1‬‬‫‪ USB2‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻫﻮ "‪"PROGRAM‬‬‫)ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪DISC USB1 USB2‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ POWER‬ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،OPEN/CLOSE‬ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪AUTO‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ "‪."OFF‬‬
‫‪CHANGE‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻫﻮ "‪ALL or‬‬‫‪) "PROGRAM‬ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻫﻮ "‪ALL or‬‬‫‪) "PROGRAM‬ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺘﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪) REPEAT‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ( ﻭ‪) SLEEP‬ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ(‬
‫ً‬
‫‪) OFF‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻫﻮ "‪ALL or‬‬‫‪) "PROGRAM‬ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ( ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫‪) REC SPEED‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻭ‪) USB REC‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ،(USB‬ﻭ‪) REPEAT‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ(‪ ،‬ﻭ‪) DELETE‬ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ( ﻭ‪SLEEP‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ "‪) "AUTO CHANGE‬ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ‪،USB‬‬‫ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 15‬ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ‪.FM‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ FM‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.TUNER/AUX‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪TUNNING‬‬
‫‪ MODE‬ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫@ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ AUTO CHANGE‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ¬ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ‪.CD/USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫‪02680K-MX-HS6000_HS7000-ZN-ARA-0220.indd 18‬‬
‫• ﻭﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ‪.FM‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 3‬ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪TIMER SET‬ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪."CLOCK‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ¬ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻮﻣﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ‪, TUNING/ALBUM :‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ‪. TUNING/ALBUM :‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ¬ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ ‪, TUNING/ALBUM :‬‬
‫‪ .a‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ¬‪.‬‬
‫‪ .b‬ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ TUNING/ALBUM‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.PRESET‬‬
‫• ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ ‪. TUNING/ALBUM :‬‬
‫‪ .c‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ¬ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ¬ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪ " TIME‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .6‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.3‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
‫✎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) Tuner‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻒ(‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ‪) DJ JOG‬ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺩﻱ ﺟﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) Preset‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ‪DJ‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪) JOG‬ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺩﻱ ﺟﻲ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ FM‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ TUNER/AUX‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ TUNING MODE‬ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪."PRESET‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪ , ، . TUNING/ALBUM‬ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪) DJ JOG‬ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺩﻱ ﺟﻲ( ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪2014-3-12 11:53:37‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺛﻮﺍ ٍﻥ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯﺕ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MO/ST‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺭﺩﻳﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪MONO‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺚ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺧﺎ ٍﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪.5‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪TUNING/ALBUM‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ,‬ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻜﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺛﻮﺍ ٍﻥ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯﺕ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.TIMER ON/ OFF‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺃﻧﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻴﻘﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺻﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ TIMER SET‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪TIME‬‬
‫"‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ¬ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ ON‬ﻟﺒﻀﻊ ﺛﻮﺍﻥٍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫‪02680K-MX-HS6000_HS7000-ZN-ARA-0220.indd 19‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .7‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ¬‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪) CHKREC‬ﻫﻞ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ؟(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .a‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ , TUNING/ALBUM‬ﺃﻭ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .8‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ¬‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ ،REC N‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪ . TUNING/ALBUM‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ,‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ REC Y‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ ،REC N‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ¬‪.‬‬
‫‪ .b‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ¬‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .c‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ , TUNING/ALBUM‬ﺃﻭ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (1‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ‪ ،REC N‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﻭﺃﻱ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺠﻴﻞ ﻻ ﻳﻠﻐﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .d‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ¬‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ‪ OFF‬ﻟﺜﻮﺍ ٍﻥ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻵﻥ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (2‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،REC Y‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .a‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ , TUNING/ALBUM‬ﺃﻭ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .a‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ¬‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ‪ ON‬ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﺛﻮﺍﻥٍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .b‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ¬‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .b‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ¬‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ‪ OFF‬ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﺛﻮﺍﻥٍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .c‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ , TUNING/ALBUM‬ﺃﻭ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .d‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ¬‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ ،VOL XX‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ‪XX‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ , TUNING/ALBUM‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ¬‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .6‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ , TUNING/ALBUM‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻛﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪...‬‬
‫‪) FM‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ(‬
‫‪) MP3/CD‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ(‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪...‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ً‬
‫‪ .a‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ¬‪.‬‬
‫✎ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫✎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ‪.ERROR‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺪﻻً ﻣﻦ ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫✎ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ , TUNING/ALBUM‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.8‬‬
‫✎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫✎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺃﻭ ‪ USB‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻛﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺹ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ(‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻬﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﺑﺪﻻً ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .b‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪TUNING/ ALBUM‬‬
‫‪ ,‬ﺃﻭ ‪..‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫✎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ MP3/CD‬ﺃﻭ ‪ USB‬ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.TUNER‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪2014-3-12 11:53:38‬‬
‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
‫‪20‬‬
‫‪02680K-MX-HS6000_HS7000-ZN-ARA-0220.indd 20‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺅﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ TIMER ON/OFF‬ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪TIMER ON/‬‬
‫‪ OFF‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪/‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪USB 1‬‬
‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ‪ USB 1‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫✎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ TIMER OFF‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺘﺎ‬
‫‪ TIMER RECORDING‬ﻭ‪.TIME‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪.USB 1‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪.USB 1‬‬
‫‪.3‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) USB REC‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ (USB‬ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) USB REC‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪(USB‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻭﺑﺚ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪.USB‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ "‪) "TRACK RECORDING‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ( ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ‬
‫( ‪ USB 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫)‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) USB REC‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ (USB‬ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) USB REC‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪(USB‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪FULL CD‬‬
‫‪) RECORDING‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ("‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) CD/ Bluetooth‬ﻗﺮﺹ‬
‫ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪/‬ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.MP3/CD‬‬
‫‪CD-ROM, USB 1‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) OPEN/CLOSE‬ﻓﺘﺢ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ(‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) USB REC‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ .(USB‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.USB2‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪OPEN/‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺻﺎ‬
‫• ﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫‪) CLOSE‬ﻓﺘﺢ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ( ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) USB REC‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ .(USB‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.USB2‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ )‬
‫ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) TUNER/AUX‬ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻒ‪/‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ >‪.<AUX‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪) USB REC‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ ،(USB‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫‪ mp3‬ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.USB2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻒ‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ‪) TUNER‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻒ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪) TUNER/AUX‬ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻒ‪/‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪) MP3 RECORDING‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪ :‬ﻝ‪‬‬
‫ﻝ”‪“MP3 RECORDING”“RECORD‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪) COPY‬ﻧﺴﺦ(‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫”‪“CHECK”“START”“COPY XX”“COPY END‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ "‪) "STOP‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ "‪) "FILE EXIST‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ( ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪2014-3-12 11:53:39‬‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫‪02680K-MX-HS6000_HS7000-ZN-ARA-0220.indd 21‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫✎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻒ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪) RECORD‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪STOP‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ .‬ﻓﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.MP3‬ﺍ)‪.(SAM-XXXX.MP3‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻪ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪.5‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳُﺴﻤﻰ ‪“RECORDING(DISCxxxx)”(FULL CD‬‬
‫)‪ RECORDING‬ﺃﻭ ‪“RECORDING”(TRACK‬‬
‫)‪ RECORDING‬ﺃﻭ )‪“COPY”(CD-ROM/USB‬ﺃﺃﻭ‬
‫)‪(CD-ROM/USB‬ﺃ”‪ “MP3 RECORDING‬ﺃﻭ ”‪TUNER‬‬
‫‪ “RECORDING‬ﺃﻭ ”‪ “AUX RECORDING‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪.USB‬‬
‫✎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪.USB‬‬
‫✎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫✎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ "‪) "OFF‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫✎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) GIGA SOUND DEAT‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺟﻴﺠﺎ( ﻋﻠﻰ "‪) "OFF‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫✎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫✎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
‫✎ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫✎ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) Tuner‬ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻒ(‪.‬‬
‫✎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ WMA/MP2‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫✎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﺔ ﻭﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ .USB‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻋﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭﻻً‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.USB‬‬
‫✎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ USB‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫"‪."NOT ENOUGH MEMORY‬‬
‫✎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ .FAT‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ NTFS‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫✎ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪ AUX‬ﻭ‪ USB‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫✎ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪) TUNER/AUX‬ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻒ‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ( ﻫﻮ ‪ 5‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪REC SPEED‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪2014-3-12 11:53:41‬‬
‫‪RECORD SPD x 1 RECORD SPD x 4‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،RECORD SPD X 4‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.RECORD SPD X1 :‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳُﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫‪02680K-MX-HS6000_HS7000-ZN-ARA-0220.indd 22‬‬
‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) EQ‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.EQ‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) EQ‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) EQ‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﺃﻭﻻً ﺛﻢ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ‪VOLUME/SEARCH‬‬
‫‪) JOG‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪OFF FLAT ARABIC MUSIC PERSIAN‬‬
‫‪MUSIC GENGE BONGO RHUMBA‬‬
‫‪ ESKISTA AFROPOP1 AFROPOP2‬‬
‫ ‪INDIAN POP PARTY POP HIP HOP‬‬
‫ ‪ROCK JAZZ CLASSIC ELECTRONIC‬‬
‫‪MP3 ENHANCER VIRTUAL SOUND U B 0‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،U B 0‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ، U B 0‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ¬‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ BASS‬ﻭ‬
‫‪) MID‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ( ﻭ‪.TREB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ‪ :‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪) BASS‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪ ., , TUNING/ALBUM‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪,-2,-4,-6‬ﺇ‪ +4,+2,0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪. +6‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ¬‪.‬‬
‫✎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ EQ‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ¬‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.EQ‬‬
‫✎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ EQ‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ¬‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.EQ‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪FOOTBALL MODE‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻡ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﻗﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ FOOTBALL MODE‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ANNOUNCER STADIUM OFF‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫‪ FOOTBALL‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“OFF‬‬
‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
‫✎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ FOOTBALL‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪GOAL‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪) MIDDLE‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪ ., , TUNING/ALBUM‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪,-2,-4,-6‬ﺇ‪ +4,+2,0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪. +6‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ¬‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪) TREBLE‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪ ., , TUNING/ALBUM‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪,-2,-4,-6‬ﺇ‪ +4,+2,0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪. +6‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ¬‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻛﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪2014-3-12 11:53:42‬‬
‫✎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻛﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻏﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫✎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ 8‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥٍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫✎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ"‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺠﻴﻊ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺭﺍﺓ ﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ GOAL‬ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪GOAL ON GOAL OFF‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪GOAL‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“GOAL OFF‬‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫‪02680K-MX-HS6000_HS7000-ZN-ARA-0220.indd 23‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪DJ BEAT‬‬
‫✎ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ GOAL‬ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻤﺰﻭﺟﺎ ﺑـ ‪.GOAL‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ DJ Beat‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺩﻱ ﺟﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ DJ BEAT‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪GIGA SOUND‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.GIGA SOUND‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ GIGA SOUND‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫| ﻫﺎﻡ |‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ GIGA SOUND BEAT‬ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ‪ GIGA‬ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪GIGA SOUND BEAT GIGA SOUND OFF‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪GIGA SOUND‬‬
‫‪ BEAT‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ "‪."GIGA SOUND OFF‬‬
‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
‫✎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ GIGA SOUND‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪BEAT WAVING‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻤﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ BEAT WAVING‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ ‪STARDUST EMERALD MOON STAR‬‬
‫ ‪PARTY FUN PURE FRESH LOVE‬‬
‫ ‪JOY SUNSET SUNRISE NATURE 1‬‬
‫‪NATURE 2 WAVE 1 WAVE 2 OFF‬‬
‫✎ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﻫﻮ ]‪ [+15 ~ -15‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ‪.0‬‬
‫• ‪ : FLANGER‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻹﻗﻼﻉ‪/‬ﻫﺒﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﺛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : CHORUS‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻞ ﻟﻐﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : WAHWAH‬ﺗﺸﺒﻪ ' ‪.'~Wah~ Wah‬‬
‫• ‪ : TREMOLO‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : FUZZ‬ﻳﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻟﻴﺠﻌﻠﻪ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﻮﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺧﺸﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : PHASER‬ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : SLAPBACK‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺻﺪﻯ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : DJ BEAT OFF‬ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
‫✎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪DJ Jog‬‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ‪.(DJ‬‬
‫✎ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫✎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ‪EFFECT‬‬
‫‪ LEVEL‬ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
‫✎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،BEAT WAVING OFF‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﻟﻤﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫✎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) DJ Jog‬ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ‪ (DJ‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻪ ﻣﺆﺧﺮًﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ‪) WahWah‬ﻭﺍﻫﻮﺍﻩ( ﺛﻢ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫‪) Panning‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ‪) DJ Jog‬ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ‪(DJ‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ‪) Panning‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ(‪.‬‬
‫✎ ﻭﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺘﻪ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) DJ Jog‬ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ‪ (DJ‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪2014-3-12 11:53:43‬‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫‪02680K-MX-HS6000_HS7000-ZN-ARA-0220.indd 24‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪PANNING‬‬
‫✎ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ‪ PANNING‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻧﺸﻄﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪ PANNING+‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ‪PANNING‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﻄﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫✎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ‪ PANNING‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ‪ FLANGER‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ WAHWAH‬ﻭ ‪ CHORUS‬ﻭ ‪ TREMOLO‬ﻭ ‪ FUZZ‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ PHASER‬ﻭ ‪ SLAPBACK‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪NON-STOP MUSIC RELAY‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ NON-STOP MUSIC RELAY‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻠﻔﺎ ‪ ، mp3‬ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪10‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍ ٍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍ ٍﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﺻﻮﻟﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ NON-STOP MUSIC RELAY‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ‪ NON-STOP RELAY‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪NON-STOP MUSIC RELAY ON NON-STOP‬‬
‫‪MUSIC RELAY OFF‬‬
‫✎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪،DANCE TIME‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.DANCE TIME OFF‬‬
‫✎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ DANCE TIME‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪،ON‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ‪ BT‬ﻭ‪TV SoundConnect‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ TUNER‬ﻭ‪ AUX‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.Mute‬‬
‫✎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺺ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪.DANCE TIME‬‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫✎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ‪ DANCE TIME‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OFF‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺃﻭ ‪ ،USB‬ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪TEMPO‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ )‪ TEMPO (+10 ~ -10‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪ ،(CDDA/ MP3/ WMA‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪ TEMPO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ TEMPO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪) EFFECT LEVEL‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ( ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) DJ JOG‬ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ‪ (DJ‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.TMEPO‬‬
‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
‫✎ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ TEMPO‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ ،Bluetooth‬ﻭ‪TV‬‬
‫‪ ،SoundConnect‬ﻭ‪ ،FM‬ﻭ‪.AUX‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪DANCE TIME‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ DANCE TIME‬ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) DANCE TIME‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺺ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫✎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،TEMPO‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪.TEMPO‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) GIGA SOUND BEAT‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺟﻴﺠﺎ( ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) GIGA‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ( ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪BOOTING‬‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 3‬ﺛﻮﺍ ٍﻥ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪) SOUND‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) GIGA SOUND BEAT‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺟﻴﺠﺎ( ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) GIGA‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ( ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 3‬ﺛﻮﺍ ٍﻥ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪) BOOTING SOUND‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪DANCE TIME ON DANCE TIME OFF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪2014-3-12 11:53:44‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ‬
‫ﻭﻛﺄﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪DANCE TIME‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“DANCE TIME OFF‬‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫‪02680K-MX-HS6000_HS7000-ZN-ARA-0220.indd 25‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻬﻚ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺮﺟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺏ‬
‫ﻭﻛﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Samsung Electronics‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ‪/‬ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﺮﺍﺽ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ؟‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪) Play/Pause‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺪﻭﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ؟‬
‫ﻗﺮﺻﺎ‬
‫• ﻫﻞ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳُﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ؟ ﻫﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ؟‬
‫• ﻫﻞ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻎ؟‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ؟‬
‫• ﻫﻞ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ؟‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ @ )ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ( ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺛﻮﺍ ٍﻥ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ؟‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪ FM‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻤﺘﺎﺯ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ "‪) "PROTECT‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ "ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ" ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻪ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪2014-3-12 11:53:45‬‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫‪02680K-MX-HS6000_HS7000-ZN-ARA-0220.indd 26‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻮاﻟﻒ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎق درﺟﺔ ﺣﺮارة اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎق درﺟﺔ اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻹﺷﺎرة‪/‬اﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء‬
‫اﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻮه اﻟﺘﻮاﻓﻘﻲ اﻟﻜﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺮص ﻣﻀﻐﻮط‬
‫اﻟﻘﺮص اﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮط‪ 12 :‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫)‪) (COMPACT DISC‬اﻟﻘﺮص اﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ(‬
‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫إﺧﺮاج اﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )‪(MX-HS7000‬‬
‫إﺧﺮاج اﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )‪(MX-HS6000‬‬
‫إﺧﺮاج ﻣﻜﺒﺮ اﻟﺼﻮت )‪(MX-HS7000‬‬
‫إﺧﺮاج ﻣﻜﺒﺮ اﻟﺼﻮت )‪(MX-HS6000‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎق اﻟﺘﺮدد‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻹﺷﺎرة‪/‬اﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ اﻹدﺧﺎل‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﻋﺎم‬
‫اﻷﺑﻌﺎد‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫اﻟﻮزن‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫‪ 4.8‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫‪ 6.15‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫‪ 11.5‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫‪) 451‬ﻋﺮض( × ‪) 220‬ارﺗﻔﺎع( × ‪) 304‬ﻋﻤﻖ(‬
‫‪) 450‬ﻋﺮض( × ‪) 225‬ارﺗﻔﺎع( × ‪) 306.7‬ﻋﻤﻖ(‬
‫‪) 450‬ﻋﺮض( × ‪) 450‬ارﺗﻔﺎع( × ‪) 320‬ﻋﻤﻖ(‬
‫‪ +5‬درﺟﺎت ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ إﻟﻰ ‪ +35‬درﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 10%‬إﻟﻰ ‪75%‬‬
‫‪ 55‬دﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫‪ 10‬دﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫‪1%‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ اﻟﻘﺮاءة ‪ 4.8 :‬إﻟﻰ ‪ 5.6‬دﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫أﻗﺼﻰ وﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ 74 :‬دﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 575‬وات‪/‬ﻗﻨﺎة )‪ 4‬أوم(‬
‫‪ 567‬وات‪/‬ﻗﻨﺎة )‪ 4‬أوم(‬
‫‪ 575‬وات‪/‬ﻗﻨﺎة )‪ 4‬أوم(‬
‫‪ 567‬وات‪/‬ﻗﻨﺎة )‪ 4‬أوم(‬
‫‪ 22‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ إﻟﻰ ‪ 20‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ 65‬دﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫‪ 50‬دﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫‪ AUX IN1 1.2‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ AUX IN2 2.0 ،‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫*‪ :‬اﻟﻤﻮاﺻﻔﺎت اﻻﺳﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd‬ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﻤﻮاﺻﻔﺎت دون إﺧﻄﺎر‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﻴﻢ اﻟﻮزن واﻷﺑﻌﺎد ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ اﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ واﻟﻤﻮاﺻﻔﺎت ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ دون إﺷﻌﺎر ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼع ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺣﻮل ﻣﺼﺪر اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ واﺳﺘﻬﻼك اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ اﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ اﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪Open Source Announcement‬‬
‫ﻹرﺳﺎل اﻻﺳﺘﻔﺴﺎرات واﻟﻄﻠﺒﺎت اﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺼﺎدر اﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ ﻋﺒﺮ اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻲ‬
‫)‪.(oss.request@samsung.com‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪2014/4/3 8:31:18‬‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫‪02680K-MX-HS6000_HS7000-ZN-ARA-0315.indd 27‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺴﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‬
.‫ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰﺧﺪﻣﺔاﻟﻌﻤﻼء اﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﺴﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ‬،‫إذا ﻛﺎن ﻟﺪﻳﻚ أﻳﺔاﺳﺘﻔﺴﺎرات أو ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎت ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ‬
 Contact Centre
Area
Asia Pacific `
AUSTRALIA
NEW ZEALAND
CHINA
13003362 603
0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726 786)
400-810-5858
HONG KONG
(852) 3698 4698
INDIA
INDONESIA
JAPAN
MALAYSIA
PHILIPPINES
SINGAPORE
THAILAND
TAIWAN
VIETNAM
MENA `
U.A.E
OMAN
KUWAIT
BAHRAIN
QATAR
EGYPT
ALGERIA
PAKISTAN
TUNISIA
JORDAN
SYRIA
IRAN
MOROCCO
1800 3000 8282 - Toll Free
1800 266 8282 - Toll Free
30308282 - Non Toll Free
0800112888
021-56997777
0120-327-527
1800-88-9999
1-800-10-7267864 [PLDT]
1-800-8-7267864 [Globe landline and Mobile]
02-4222111 [Other landline]
1800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
0-2689-3232,
1800-29-3232
0800-32-9999
1800 588 889
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
183-2255 (183-CALL)
8000-4726
800-2255 (800-CALL)
08000-726786
16580
021 36 11 00
0800-Samsung (72678)
80-1000-12
0800-22273
0665777444
18252273
021-8255
080 100 2255
SAUDI ARABIA
920021230
TURKEY
Africa `
NIGERIA
444 77 11
GHANA
COTE D’ IVOIRE
SENEGAL
CAMEROON
KENYA
UGANDA
TANZANIA
RWANDA
BURUNDI
DRC
SUDAN
SOUTH AFRICA
BOTSWANA
NAMIBIA
ZAMBIA
MOZAMBIQUE
0800-726-7864
0800-10077
0302-200077
8000 0077
800-00-0077
7095- 0077
0800 545 545
0800 300 300
0685 88 99 00
9999
200
499999
1969
0860-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
8007260000
08 197 267 864
0211 350370
847267864 / 827267864
02680K-MX-HS6000_HS7000-ZN-ARA-0315.indd 28
Web Site
www.samsung.com/au/support
www.samsung.com/nz/support
www.samsung.com/cn/support
www.samsung.com/hk/support (Chinese)
www.samsung.com/hk_en/support (English)
www.samsung.com/in/support
www.samsung.com/id/support
www.samsung.com/jp /support
www.samsung.com/my /support
www.samsung.com/ph /support
www.samsung.com/sg /support
www.samsung.com/th /support
www.samsung.com/tw /support
www.samsung.com/vn /support
www.samsung.com/ae/support (English)
www.samsung.com/ae_ar/support (Arabic)
www.samsung.com/eg /support
www.samsung.com/n_africa /support
www.samsung.com/pk /support
www.samsung.com/n_africa /support
www.samsung.com/Levant/support (English)
www.samsung.com/Levant/support (English)
www.samsung.com/iran /support
www.samsung.com/n_africa /support
www.samsung.com/sa /support
www.samsung.com/sa_en/support (English)
www.samsung.com/tr/support
www.samsung.com/africa_en/support
www.samsung.com/africa_fr /support
www.samsung.com/support
www.samsung.com/support
2014/3/18 11:44:59
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising